دامئًا يف خدمتك
‫دامئًا يف خدمتك‬
‫س ّجل منتجك واحصل عىل الدعم من‬
‫‪www.philips.com/support‬‬
‫‪HTD3509‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أي ﺳﺆال؟‬
‫اﺗّﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) EasyLink‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻐﻴري ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓري ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﱪ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻫﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻓﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴ ّﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﴐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀامﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻙﻩﺭﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ!‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﻌ ّﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻭﺍين ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ مبﺮﻛﺰ ‪ Philips‬ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﳌﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬مبﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍمئﺎً ﻋﲆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ( ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻏﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﴫ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻚﻩﺭﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ!‬
‫•ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺢ مبﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﲆ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ مبﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ!‬
‫•ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺰ ّﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺛ ّﺒﺖ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ميﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤ ّﻤﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪Koninklijke Philips Electronics‬‬
‫‪ N.V.‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺛ ّﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ مبﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘ ٍﻮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ مبﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮيئ ﻭﻏري ﻣﺮيئ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺍﻹﺣامﺀ!‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﺜ ّﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻀامﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ!‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﺨﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﻗﺪميﺔ ﻭﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫•ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏري‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣامﺛﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘني ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩﻫام ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ!‬
‫•ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ِ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ! ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﻐﻀﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺘني ﻣﻦ ﻓﱰﺓ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻼﻉ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻈﻦّ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻓﻮ ًﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺩﻭ ًﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫•ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴري ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ِ ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﺑﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﴩﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ II‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻓري ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫•ﻻ ُﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏري ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﰲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻ ُﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﺎً ﻣﺸ ّﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامﺵ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻋﲆ ﴍﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺣﺒﺎً ﺑﻚ ﰲ ‪ !Philips‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪ّ ،Philips‬‬
‫‪.www.philips.com/welcome‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻓﱰﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻤﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫‪a a‬ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪b b‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪) c c‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً(‬
‫‪dd‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCEe e‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀ ّﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﱰﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣريﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ ‪Rovi‬‬
‫‪ .Corporation‬ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻟﴩﻭﻁ متﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪) f f‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪-‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪b b‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫•‪ :DISC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :AUDIO SOURCE‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :RADIO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫•‪ :USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀ ّﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪c c‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﺘﻨ ّﻘﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫•ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤني ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﻋﲆ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ )ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫•ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤني ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﻋﲆ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪OKd d‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ee‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪-/+ f f‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫)ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪gg‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪) / h h‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ(‬
‫•ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻌ ّﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪i i‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﴫ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOUNDj j‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪SURRk k‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً(‬
‫‪ll‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) a a‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪-‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫•ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻋﻨﺪ متﻜني ‪ ،EasyLink‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ HDMI CEC‬ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) m m‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪nn‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪OPTIONS‬‬
‫‪) o o‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪) p p‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUTc c‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮ ّﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SYNCq q‬‬
‫•ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO IN-AUXd d‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ متﺎﺛﲇ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ متﺎﺛﲇ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺧري ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني( ﻟﺘﺄﺧري ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀ ّﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(USB‬‬
‫‪aa‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪MICb b‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO INc c‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪) MP3‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪AC MAINSa a‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪SPEAKERSb b‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ مبﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL IN-OPTICALe e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﴫﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT (ARC)f f‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪FM ANTENNAg g‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍيئ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ مبﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﲆ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﱪ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﳌﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘامﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ FRONT CENTER2‬ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 3‬‬
‫‪ FRONT LEFT‬ﻣﻜﱪﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﴪ( ﻭ‪FRONT‬‬
‫‪)RIGHT‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻷميﻦ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﴪ ﻭﺍﻷميﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﴪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷميﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻠﻮﺳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪4 4‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮ ّﻣﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﻌﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺍً ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺎً ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛري ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛري ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﻭﺿﻌﻬام ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ REAR LEFT‬ﻣﻜﱪﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﴪ( ﻭ‪REAR‬‬
‫‪)RIGHT‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻷميﻦ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴني ﰲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒني ﺍﻷميﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﴪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺤﺎ ٍﺫ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SUBWOOFER5‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﱰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﴪﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﱰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑني ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪FRONT‬‬
‫‪RIGHT‬‬
‫‪FRONT‬‬
‫‪CENTER‬‬
‫‪FRONT‬‬
‫‪LEFT‬‬
‫‪SUB‬‬
‫‪WOOFER‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺳامﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ )‪HDMI (ARC‬‬
‫‪REAR‬‬
‫‪RIGHT‬‬
‫‪REAR‬‬
‫‪LEFT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ .(ARC‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎً ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI ARC‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺳامﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐري ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﲇ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)‪ OUT (ARC‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ مبﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ARC‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI ARC‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ .HDMI-CEC‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﻥ ‪ HDMI-CEC‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ مت ّﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤ ّﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ CEC‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﱪ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ مبﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﺘﻤ ّﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳامﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪،‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ .HDMI-CEC‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ‪ HDMI-CEC‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ مت ّﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ CEC‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﱪ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ مبﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻛﻠﻴﻬام‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﺘﻤ ّﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳامﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪،‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ DVI‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺮ ّﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮ ّﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ّﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ :2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎً ﻣﻊ ‪ّ ،HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ OUT‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ مبﻮﺻﻞ ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛّﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ‪ AV IN‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ COMPOSITE‬ﺃﻭ ‪.BASEBAND‬‬
‫‪2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮيت ﻟﺴامﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 3‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)‪ OUT (ARC‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ مبﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮيت ﻟﺴامﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SOURCE‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳامﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ،HDMI ARC‬ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻦ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣ ّﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Speaker Setup] < [Audio‬‬
‫‪4 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻋﲆ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴري‪:‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Speakers Volume‬ﺗﻌﻴني ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Speakers Delay‬ﺗﻌﻴني ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧري ﳌﻜﱪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺎ ٍﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ :1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺑﴫﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) EasyLink‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺑﴫﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺻﻞ ‪ OPTICAL OUT‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ‪ SPDIF‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ ،Philips EasyLink‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪) HDMI-CEC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ(‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤ ّﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﱪ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﱪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.SPDIF OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘامﺛﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪AUDIO IN- AUX‬‬
‫‪VCR‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪ HDMI-CEC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳامﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﴩﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﲇ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪.HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫•ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪HDMI-‬‬
‫‪ CEC‬ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻦ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣ ّﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ متﺎﺛﲇ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ AUX‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫متﻜني ‪EasyLink‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Video‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪4 4‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪< [EasyLink Setup] < [HDMI Setup‬‬
‫]‪.[On] < [EasyLink‬‬
‫‪5 5‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪HDMI-‬‬
‫‪ .CEC‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋني ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﱃ ›‪‹Amplifier‬‬
‫•ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ( )ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫) ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪EasyLink‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،EasyLink‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI-CEC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪) [One Touch Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﺴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ متﻜني‬
‫»ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﺴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ«‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪) [One Touch Standby‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺒﺴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ متﻜني ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺒﺴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫•]‪) [Sys Audio Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪:‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫متﻜني ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﱪ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪) [Audio Mapping‬ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪:‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋني ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ مبﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ‪ ،EasyLink‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪< [EasyLink Setup] < [HDMI Setup] < [Video] < [Setup‬‬
‫]‪.[EasyLink‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ مل ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺳامﻉ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ متﻜني ‪ EasyLink‬ﻋﲆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫•ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴني ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﱃ »‪«Amplifier‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ( )ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫) ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫•ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ‪.EasyLink‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Video‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪4 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sys] < [EasyLink Setup] < [HDMI Setup‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.[On] < [Audio Control‬‬
‫‪5 5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫•ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪ ،[Off‬ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪< [EasyLink Setup] < [HDMI Setup‬‬
‫]‪. [Audio Mapping‬‬
‫‪6‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴني ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ،ARC‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴني ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ARC‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻦ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺣ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫متﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻً ﺳﻬ ًﻼ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻋﲆ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫•]‪ :[DISC‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[USB‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫•]ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Setup‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً( ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﴎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻜﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻸﻋﲆ‪/‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪DISC‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SYNC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪OPTIONS‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺄﺧري ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫‪2‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISC‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪ [DISC‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫•‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﱪ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Audio Sync] < [Audio] < [Setup‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﴆ ‪ VCD‬ﻭ‪SVCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮﴆ ‪ VCD‬ﻭ‪.SVCD‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[PBC] < [Preferences‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني( ﳌﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ VCD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛام ميﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪.AUDIO SYNC‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨ ّﻘﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[PBC‬متﻜني ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻘﺮﴆ ‪ VCD‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ SVCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[Hebrew‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ .USB‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫•ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻮ "‪ ،"movie.avi‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫"‪ "movie.srt‬ﺃﻭ "‪."movie.sub‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .srt :‬ﻭ‪ .sub‬ﻭ‪ .txt‬ﻭ‪ .ssa‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ .ass‬ﻭ‪ .smi‬ﻭ‪ .sami.‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DivX‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ ،OPTIONS‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪5 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[DivX Subtitle] < [Preferences‬‬
‫‪6 6‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫]‪[Standard‬‬
‫]‪[Chinese‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﺍﺀ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ www.divx.com‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ VOD‬ﻟـ‬
‫‪.DivX‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[DivX(R) VOD Code] < [General‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ VOD‬ﻟـ ‪ DivX‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺮﺟامﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ VOD‬ﻟـ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DRM‬ﻭﺻّ ﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺟامﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻜﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﱪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍمنﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟرنﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ مبﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪.MP4‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫•ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬متﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ FAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪،NTFS‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒري ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬مبﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫)‪ (USB‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.USB‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 3‬‬
‫‪4 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ OPTIONS‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.OPTIONS‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫↵ ↵ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴري‪:‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Info‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[PBC‬متﻜني ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﰲ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ SVCD‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Aspect ratio‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Repeat‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒري ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒري‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐري‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Subtitle‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Angle‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣريﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Microphone‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Karaoke setup‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Vocal‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺭﻳﻮيك ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.OPTIONS‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻋﲆ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴري‪:‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Color‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Photo preview‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Repeat‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒري ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒري‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐري‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪4 4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻋﲆ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﴍﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﴍﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،BACK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺰّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ AM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏري ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣني‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴ ُﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍيئ ‪ FM‬ﺑـ ‪ FM ANTENNA‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍيئ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ RADIO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧريﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ AUTO INSTALL...PRESS PLAY‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘامﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴريﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻋﲆ‪/‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﳌﺤﻮ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍً ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪RADIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪:‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.RADIO‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻛ ّﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗني ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ RADIO‬ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫•ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫•ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﻏري ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﻷﺩىن ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ FM‬ﺑني ‪50‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ RADIO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑني ‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫•ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫•ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﱰ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﱰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ MP3‬مبﻮﺻﻞ ‪ AUDIO IN‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 6.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﱰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺤ ّﻮﻝ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﱰ ‪ 6.5 -‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﱰ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AUDIO SOURCE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ AUDIO IN‬ﻋﲆ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫↵ ↵ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻸﻋﲆ‪/‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ( ﻭ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Microphone‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Mic Volume‬ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Echo Level‬ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Karaoke Scoring‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻨﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Karaoke Idol‬ﺃﺟ ِﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮيك ﻣﻊ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Key Shift‬ﺗﻐﻴري ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Vocal‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺭﻳﻮيك ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻌ ّﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SOUND‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :MOVIE‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻴﻨامﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :MUSIC‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :ORIGINAL‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛريﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫•‪ :NEWS‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘامﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎﻅ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :GAMING‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺜريﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﱄ ﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺸ ّﻮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻟﺘﻮﻓري ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴريﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌ ّﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ .BACK‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﱪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SURR‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :MULTI-CH‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ 5.1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓري ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨامﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ :STEREO‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ ﺛﻨﺎيئ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﱄ ﻟﻼﺳﺘامﻉ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ .2.1‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘريﻳﻮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [General‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫•]‪ :[OSD Language‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Preferences‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Audio‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Subtitle‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Disc Menu‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﺗﻜﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [Others‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ميﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Treble/Bass‬ﺗﻌﻴني ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ )ﺍﻟﻄﻨني‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼيث( ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﺍﻟﺠﻬري( ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Night Mode‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﲇ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺒﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻣﺜ ًﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳌﺮ ّﻣﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Video‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[TV System‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[TV Display‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﳌﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Picture Setting‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[HD JPEG‬متﻜني ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫•]‪ :[HDMI Setup‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫‪.HDMI‬‬
‫* ]‪: :[Resolution‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫* ]‪ :[HDMI Deep Color‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺣﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎمل‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺍﳌﻼﻳني ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ متﻜﻴﻨﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫‪ Deep Color‬ﻋﱪ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫* ]‪ :[Wide Screen‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ُﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ]‪ :[EasyLink Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.EasyLink‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Preferences‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Password‬ﺗﻌﻴني ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴريﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻞ ‪.000000‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Parental Control‬متﻜني ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻘ ّﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻀﻮﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Adult 8‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫‪.Digital‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [General‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Disc Lock‬ﺃﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 20‬ﻗﺮﺻﺎً ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Audio‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫•]‪ :[HDMI Audio‬ﺗﻌﻴني ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Audio Sync‬ﺗﻌﻴني ﺗﺄﺧري ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Speaker Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Sound Mode‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Preferences‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[PBC‬متﻜني ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻘﺮﴆ ‪ VCD‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ SVCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓري ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [General‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ‪ Philips‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺴني ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Display Dim‬ﺗﻐﻴري ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Sleep Timer‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•]‪ :[Auto Standby‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ مل ّ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ .www.philips.com/support‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧري ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Philips‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧري‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜ ّﺒﺖ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺜ ّﺒﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤ ّﻤﻞ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪميﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Default] < [Preferences‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪4 4‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵متﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴني ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺜ ّﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Version Info] < [Preferences‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﱪ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫•ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ متﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪FAT‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،NTFS‬ﻭﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ 75‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﲆ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤ ّﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫•ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﱰﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺭﺷﻔﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.ZIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧري‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.www.philips.com/support‬‬
‫‪3‬ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Philips‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.zip‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪4 4‬‬
‫‪5 5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺭﺷﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ zip‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﳌﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪6 6‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺗُﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴري ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﲆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫↵ ↵ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘامﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ مل‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺎﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫•‪،DVD-R/-RW ،DVD+R/+RW ،DVD-Video‬‬
‫‪ ،CD-R/CD-RW ،DVD+R/-R DL‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺻﻮيت‪،‬‬
‫‪ CD/SVCD‬ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪ ،WMA‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ ،DivX‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.wma ،.mp3 :‬‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.mpeg ،.mpg ،.divx ،.avi :‬‬
‫•ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.jpeg ،.jpg :‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ‬
‫ّ‬
‫•ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺟامﻟﻴﺔ‪ 300 :‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪) RMS‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﲇ )‪(30% (THD‬‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ‪ 20 :‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ -20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ±3 /‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫•ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‪ 65 < :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪/ (CCIR‬‬
‫)‪(A-weighted‬‬
‫•ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫•‪ 2 :AUX‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫•‪ 1 :AUDIO IN‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫•ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/NTSC / PAL :‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫•ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪،1080i ،720p ،480p/576p ،480i/576i :HDMI‬‬
‫•ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺟامﻟﻴﺔ‪ 50 :‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪) RMS‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﲇ )‪(30% (THD‬‬
‫•ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ‪ 8 :‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫•ﻣﻀﺨامﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ‪ 133‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 5.25‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫•ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ 265 x 265 x 160 :‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ 2.50 :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫•ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪1080p‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫•ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪:S/PDIF‬‬
‫•ﺑﴫﻱ‪TOSLINK :‬‬
‫•ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫•‪ 32 :MP3‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 44.1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 48 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫•‪ 44.1 :WMA‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 48 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫•ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪:‬‬
‫•‪ 32 :MP3‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 320 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫•‪ 64 :WMA‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 192 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫•ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫•ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼني‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ‪ 87.5-108‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫•ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ‪/‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ‪87.5-‬‬
‫‪ 108‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ 50/100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫•ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ‪ 50‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ‪ 200‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ -12.5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪±6 /‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫•ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ USB :‬ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ )‪(2.0‬‬
‫•ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒري ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪(MSC) USB‬‬
‫•ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪NTFS ،FAT32 ،FAT16 :‬‬
‫•ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ 5 :USB‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 500 ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﲇ ﺃﻣﺒري‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫•ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫•ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼني‪/‬ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‪ 220-240 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ~‪ 50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫•ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ‪110-240 :‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ~‪ 50-60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ 50 :‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ 0.5 ≥ :‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫•ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ 325 × 58 × 360 :‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ 2.3 :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪:‬‬
‫•ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺟامﻟﻴﺔ‪ 50 :‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪) RMS‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﲇ )‪(30% (THD‬‬
‫•ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ 4 :‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫•ﻣﻀﺨامﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ‪ 63.5 × 1‬ﻣﻢ )‪2.5‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‬
‫•ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ 83 x 88 x 85 :‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ 0.26 :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫•ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ 1 :‬ﻣﱰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪:‬‬
‫•ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺟامﻟﻴﺔ‪ 50 × 4 :‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪RMS‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﲇ )‪(30% (THD‬‬
‫•ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ 4 :‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫•ﻣﻀﺨامﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ‪ 63.5 × 1‬ﻣﻢ )‪2.5‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‬
‫•ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ 83 x 88 x 85 :‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ 0.25 :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‪/‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫•ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ )ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‪ 2 :‬ﻣﱰ‬
‫•ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ )ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪ 6 :‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫•‪ 1.5-R03-AAA x 1‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ )‪GaAIAs (CD‬‬
‫•ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪ 650-662 :‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﱰ )‪ 785-795 ،(DVD‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﱰ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‬
‫•ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ 6 :‬ﻣﻴﲇ ﻭﺍﻁ )‪ 7 ،(DVD‬ﻣﻴﲇ ﻭﺍﻁ )‪VCD/‬‬
‫‪(CD‬‬
‫•ﺗﻔﺮﻉ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ 60 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺇﱃ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﲇ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟيك ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻀامﻥ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺎً‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎً ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪.www.philips.com/welcome‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑني ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫•‪ (1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪.AUDIO SYNC‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤني( ﰲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺧﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﳌﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌ ّﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ّ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DVD±RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVD±R‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘامﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌ ّﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ »ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ« ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺮ ّﻣﺰ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘامﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺟامﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﱪ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﰲ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏري ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫•ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﱰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ّ‬
‫ﺗﻌ ّﺬﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌ ّﺬﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﲆ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI ARC‬‬
‫•ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴني ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ »ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ« ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ »‪ «x‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺗﻌ ّﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌ ّﺬﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪.EasyLink‬‬
‫•ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪،Philips EasyLink‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻨّﻌني ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔني‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ً CEC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳام ﻣﺨﺘﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ متﻜﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Philips EasyLink‬‬
‫)‪ .(HDMI-CEC‬ﻟيك ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.EasyLink‬‬
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
DivX , DivX Ultra , DivX Certified and associated
logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its
subsidiaries and are used under license.
DivX Ultra Certified to play DivX video with
advanced features and premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video
format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your files
into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified device must be registered in order to play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies.
To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX
VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.
divx.com for more information on how to complete
your registration.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
20
Specifications are subject to change without notice
© 2016 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All rights reserved.
Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips N.V. or their respective owners.
HTD3509_98_UM (AR)_V1.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising